Fujitsu AUXK054GLAH Installation Manual

Fujitsu AUXK054GLAH Installation Manual
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﺭﺑﻲ‬
‫‪TM‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXM018GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXM024GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXM030GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXK018GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXK024GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXK030GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXK034GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXK036GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXK045GLAH‬‬
‫‪AUXK054GLAH‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻳﻳﻡ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻠﺳﻠﻲ ﻭﺳﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﻧﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻُﻧﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻣﻬﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺑﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ‪9371022475-04‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:21 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 1‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ‪9371022475-04‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ‪] VRF‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻳﻁﻲ )ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﺑﺔ([‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‪1 ...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪1 ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪1................................................................................... R410A‬‬
‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟـ ‪1................................................................................................. R410A‬‬
‫‪ .3.2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ‪2........................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪2.............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪2 ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪2...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.3‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ‪3...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.3‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪3..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ‪4 ....................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪4...........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.4‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪4..............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.4‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ )ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ( ‪4................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪5..........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪5 ............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪6 ..................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.6‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ‪6.............................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.6‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪6........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.6‬ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪7...................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .4.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪7................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .5.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪8.........................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .6.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪8....................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ‪10 ......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ‪10.................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ‪10.........................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .3.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‪11 .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‪11 ................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ‪11 .................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .1.9‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ(‪11 .............................................................‬‬
‫‪ .2.9‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪11 ............................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‪11 .......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫‪ .11‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪12 .......................................................................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﺑﻌﻧﺎﻳﺔ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺟﺯء ﻣﻥ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻧﻔﺳﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻓﻧﻲ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﻟﺩﻳﻪ ﺷﻬﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻫﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻧﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻣﻭﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺷﻛﻝ ﺟﺯ ًء ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﺄﻟﻑ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻛﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ .‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﺣﺩﻫﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺧﻁ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ ﻣﺣﻣﻲ ﺑﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻳﻌﻣﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ‬
‫ﺗﺑﻠﻎ ‪ 3‬ﻣﻡ ﻟﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺧﻁ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﺭﻗﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺷﺧﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﻟﻳﺳﺕ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ ﻭﺑﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺟﻭﺍء ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﻧﻔﺟﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺍﻧﺗﻅﺭ ‪ 5‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻕ ﻗﺑﻝ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺻﻳﺎﻧﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ‬
‫ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺷﺭ ﻣﻭﻅﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﺄﻥ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2‬ﻧﺑﺫﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‬
‫‪ .1.2‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪R410A‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺧﻼﻑ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻌًﺎ ﺑﺻﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻛﺳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺯ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻧﻘﺹ ﺍﻷﻛﺳﺟﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﻟﻣﺱ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻠﺳﻌﺎﺕ ﺻﻘﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﻼء ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻭﺭ ﻭﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.2‬ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟـ ‪R410A‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ ،R410A‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﻧﻳﻌﻬﺎ ﺧﺻﻳﺻًﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ‪ .R410A‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺿﻐﻁ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ R410A‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 1.6‬ﻣﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ‪ ،R22‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻣﺯﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻼﻭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻡ ﺍﻷﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫‪ .1‬ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻗﺭﺍءﺓ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺗﺗﻌﻠﻕ ﺑﺳﻼﻣﺗﻙ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺗﻘﺩﻳﻡ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻔﺎﻅ ﺑﻬﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻧﺎﻭﻝ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺿﺭﺭ ﺷﺧﺻﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﺗﻠﻛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭﻩ ﻟﻸﺩﺍﺓ ‪R22‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﻌﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺧﻠﻁ ﺳﻭﺍﺋﻝ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﻌﺏ ﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ‪ -0.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5.3‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻋﺭﺽ ﺿﻐﻁ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪ -0.1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 3.8‬ﻣﻳﺟﺎﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺷﺣﻥ‬
‫ﻟﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﻋﻛﺳﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻍ ﺑﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ -100.7‬ﻛﻳﻠﻭﺑﺎﺳﻛﺎﻝ )‪ 5‬ﻁﻥ‪ -755 ،‬ﻣﻡ ﺯﺋﺑﻕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻛﺗﺷﺎﻑ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ R410A‬ﻣﻥ ‪.HFC‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻳﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻓﺎﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻠﺏ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺯﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺳﺅﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺧﺻﺹ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺑﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻳﺧﺎﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺑﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﻣﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻻ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻌﻠﻳﻙ ﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺔ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﻧﺗﺞ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺳﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﺧﻭﻝ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺛﻧﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ .‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻟﺿﺎﻏﻁ ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺛﻡ ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻁﻊ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺻﻣﻳﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺿﻌﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻳﻥ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﻳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-1‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:21 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 1‬‬
‫‪ .3.2‬ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻷﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﻏﻳﺭ ﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﻬﺎ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻥ ﻭﻻ ﺗﺗﺧﻠﺹ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻣﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺑﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫‪UTG-BKXA-W‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﺎﺣﺔ ‪ 56‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺑﺎﻋﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺧﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫‪UTR-YDZK‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺗﺟﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﻋﺯﻝ ﻟﻠﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ‬
‫‪UTZ-KXRA‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻪ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ 80%‬ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‬
‫‪UTZ-VXRA‬‬
‫ﻟﺳﺣﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪UTY-TFSXZ‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺻﺭ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ .3‬ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﺎﻣًﺎ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺻﻌﺏ ﺗﺣﺭﻳﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻛﺗﺎﺏ(‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .1.3‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫)‪(CD-ROM‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻼﻧﻘﻼﺏ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻭﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻭﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻳُﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻓﻊ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ )ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‬
‫ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﺻﻐﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺏ )ﺟﺯء ﻋﻠﻭﻱ ﻛﺭﺗﻭﻧﻲ(‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻁﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻯ ﻣﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺳﺎﺣﻝ ﺍﻟﺑﺣﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻣﻠﻳﺋﺔ ﺑﺯﻳﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺑﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻁﺑﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺩﻫﻭﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﻼﺳﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﻧﺑﻌﺙ ﻣﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﺳﻠﺑًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻛﻠﻭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻣﺽ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻠﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺳﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻭﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺣﺗﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻟﻳﺎﻑ ﻛﺭﺑﻭﻧﻳﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺑﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﺗﻁﺎﻳﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ ﻣﺛﻝ ﻣﺭﻗﻕ ﺍﻟﻁﻼء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺑﻧﺯﻳﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﺳﺗﻘﺭﺍﺭﻩ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺑﻭﻝ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﻣﻭﻧﻳﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻏﺭﺍﺽ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻌﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺭﺑﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻳﻭﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺭﺍﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺎﺗﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻔﻅ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﻗﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻔﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺩﻧﻲ ﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺷﻳﺎء ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻔﻭﻅﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺯﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺭﺏ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺧﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻗﺎﺑﻝ ﻟﻼﺷﺗﻌﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻠﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺗﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﻟﻐﺭﺽ ﻣﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﺳﺗﻘﺑﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻳﻔﺯﻳﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺭﺍﺩﻳﻭ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﻗﻣﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 1‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻠﻘﻰ ﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺽ ﺍﻟﻅﺭﻭﻑ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﻗﺗﺭﺍﺏ ﺃﻁﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺳﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺧﺫ ﺇﺟﺭﺍءﺍﺕ ﻭﻗﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻬﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ "ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻳﺔ" )ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ( ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻭﺍء ﺗﺣﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 80%‬ﻣﻥ ﺣﻳﺙ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 30‬ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺛﻣﺔ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ ,32‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ ‪(25‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻳﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪(7‬‬
‫)‪(8‬‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﻭﻱ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ ﻟﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺇﻋﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺟﺏ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺃﻧﺣﺎء ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ (RB‬ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺳﻬﻝ ﻣﻧﻪ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﻳﻪ ﺗﺿﺧﻳﻡ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﻭﺍﺗﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺗﻳﺢ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪ .4.2‬ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺻﻑ‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZC‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ‪(CNB01 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZB‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ‪(CNA01 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZD‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ‪(CNA02 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZ7‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ‪(CNA03 /‬‬
‫‪UTY-XWZXZE‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ‪(CNA04 /‬‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻘﺑﻝ ‪IR‬‬
‫‪UTY-LBHXD‬‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻱ‬
‫‪UTY-SHZXC‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﺭﻳﺿﺔ‬
‫‪UTG-AKXA-W‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﺇﻫﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﺣﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ُﺗﺧﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﻳﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺟﻭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-2‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:21 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 2‬‬
‫• ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ .2.3‬ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫‪80‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 256‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )‪(030،024،AUXM018‬‬
‫‪ 298‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ )‪(054،045،036،034،030،024،AUXK018‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺳﻘﻑ ﻗﻭﻱ ﻭﻣﺗﻳﻥ‬
‫‪ 1500‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫‪293‬‬
‫‪45‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪342‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫)ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ(‬
‫‪ 3000‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫‪180‬‬
‫‪140‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺋﻕ‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫‪ 1800‬ﻣﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪H‬‬
‫‪ 1000‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫• ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻗﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ :H‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫‪) H‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫* ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺳﻘﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫‪3,500‬‬
‫‪3,600‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫• ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪352‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ‪ × 10‬ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 3.2‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻲ ﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ )‪ 4‬ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ(‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭ ‪Ø 70‬‬
‫)ﻗﻁﻊ(‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭ ‪Ø 144‬‬
‫)ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‬
‫‪250‬‬
‫‪163‬‬
‫‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ‬
‫‪163‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪3,000‬‬
‫‪3,200‬‬
‫‪3,200‬‬
‫‪4,200‬‬
‫‪90‬‬
‫‪AUXK‬‬
‫‪018/024/030/034‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪AUXM‬‬
‫‪018/024/030‬‬
‫‪AUXK‬‬
‫‪036/045/054‬‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﻗﻁﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‬
‫‪100‬‬
‫‪83‬‬
‫ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ‪ × 4‬ﻗﻁﺭ ‪ 3.2‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪:‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻭﺻﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻑ ﻟﻠﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ *‪1‬‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻗﻧﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺯﻳﻊ ﻭﻣﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻣﺗﺻﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺑﻭﻋﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﻟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ )ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﻌﺑﻭﺓ( ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻭﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﺧﺭﻡ ﺍﻟﺛﻘﻭﺏ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺣﺩﺩ ﺃﻓﺿﻝ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﻫﻭﺍء ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻣﻥ ‪ 3‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 4‬ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻫﺎﺕ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﻓﺫ‪ ،‬ﻧﻭﺻﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﻘﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻧﻣﻁ ﺇﻏﻼﻕ ﻣﻌﻳﻥ‪ ،‬ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻁﻘﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻕ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪) .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ .3.3‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻪ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﺣﻣﻝ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻝ ‪ 5‬ﺃﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ ﻭﻻ ﻳﺿﺧﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﻭﺕ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﺑﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻔﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺳﻘﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.3.3‬ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺇﻁﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﻧﺎﻙ ﺧﻁﺭ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﻔﻛﻭﻛﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻭﺧﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺣﻣﻝ ﻭﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ 490‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.3.3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻣﻭﺍﺿﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻧﻭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻭﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪45‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪45‬‬
‫‪) 840‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪) 796‬ﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‬
‫‪ 50‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪100‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪45‬‬
‫‪ 200‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪205‬‬
‫‪) 950‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ(‬
‫‪ 860‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 910‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ(‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻫﻳﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ﻫﻳﻛﻼ ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ ﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺯﻡ ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺑﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺩﻋﻡ ﻋﻣﻭﺩﻳﺔ ﻣﺿﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﺯﻻﺯﻝ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ M8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.M10‬‬
‫ﺧﺭﺳﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻟﻳﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺛﺑﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺳﺩﺍﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ‪M10‬‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫‪ .3.3.3‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 860‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 910‬ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ(‬
‫‪) 950‬ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ(‬
‫‪130‬‬
‫‪) 840‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪130‬‬
‫‪) 768‬ﻣﻳﻭﻝ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪39‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪45‬‬
‫‪130‬‬
‫‪50‬‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫‪130‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺃﻓﻘﻳًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺃﺳﻔﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻭﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ )ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪AUXM‬‬
‫‪246‬‬
‫‪256‬‬
‫‪AUXK‬‬
‫‪288‬‬
‫‪298‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﻠﻛﺔ )ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺣﺿﻳﺭﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ( ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺃﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ‬
‫ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﺿﺑﻳﻁﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ‪A‬‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ ,‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ‪) B‬ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ(‬
‫)ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻫﺎ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫‪ 10‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪Ar-3‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:21 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 3‬‬
‫‪ .4.3.3‬ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ‬
‫• ﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻳﺯﺍﻥ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺎء‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺩﻗﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻳًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻝ ﺣﻳﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻋﺎﻟﻳًﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻁﻔﻭ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.3.4‬ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺧﺭﺍﻁﻳﻡ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ .4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻏﺭﻳﺑﺔ )ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺧﻼﻑ ﻁﺭﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ .R410A‬ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺧﺯﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺳﺩ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺭﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﻟﺣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺦ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻧﻳﺗﺭﻭﺟﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﻋﺑﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻗﻁﻊ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺻﺎﺻﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﺷﻭﺍﺋﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺃﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ )ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ (RB‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺍﻟﻲ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪ .R410A‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺣﻣﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺭﺻﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﺻﻘﻬﺎ ﻟﻣﻧﻊ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺍﻷﺗﺭﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.4‬ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻣﻭﺟﻭﺩﺓ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺁﺧﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻳﺔ )‪(R22‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ‪ ،R410A‬ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ A‬ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 0.5‬ﻣﻡ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺑًﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ )ﻟﻠﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‬
‫‪ (R410A‬ﻭﺫﻟﻙ ﻟﺗﺣﻘﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ‪ .A‬ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑـ ‪.R410A‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺟﻭﺍﻧﺏ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻧﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻠﻭﺙ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺷﻛﻠﺔ ﺃﺛﻧﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺻﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺳﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻘﺎﻳﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻁﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﻋﺩﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﺗﺣﺎﻡ ﻣﺧﺗﺯﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﺳﻔﻭﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺯﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺑﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 40‬ﻣﺟﻡ‪ 10/‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺗﻌﺭﺿﺕ ﻟﻠﺗﻠﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻭﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍﺋﻬﺎ )ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻲ(‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫ﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻧﺑﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﺷﻌﺭﻱ ﻟﻼﻧﺳﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﻠﻭﺛﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪ .‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﻳﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪ R410A‬ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺿﻐﻁ‬
‫ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ )‪ ،(R22‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﻭﺍﺩ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ R410A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻧﺣﺎﺱ ﺃﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﻥ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻟﻭ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻧﺣﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺩﻧﺔ )‪(R410A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ]ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‬
‫]‪ [L‬ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﺳﻕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‬
‫ﻭﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻛﺳﺭ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺩﺵ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻟﺏ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ‪] A‬ﻣﻡ[‬
‫)ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﻟـ‬
‫‪ ،R410A‬ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﺽ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪] B -0.4‬ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪9.1‬‬
‫‪13.2‬‬
‫‪16.6‬‬
‫‪19.7‬‬
‫‪24.0‬‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪0.5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫‪(1/4) 6.35‬‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ]ﻣﻡ[‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪22‬‬
‫‪26‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪29‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪36‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﻋﺑﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻁﺣﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .2.3.4‬ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﺥ ﺍﻟﺣﺫﺭ ﺣﺗﻰ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 90‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻛﺭﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺻﻌﺏ ﺛﻧﻳﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﻫﺎ ﻷﻛﺛﺭ ﻣﻥ ‪ 3‬ﻣﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫‪(3/8) 9.52‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺛﻧﻳﺎﺕ ﺣﺎﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪(1/2) 12.70‬‬
‫‪0.80‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺛﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻣﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻧﻛﺳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪(5/8) 15.88‬‬
‫‪1.00‬‬
‫‪(3/4) 19.05‬‬
‫‪1.20‬‬
‫‪ .3.3.4‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫‪ .2.4‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻳﻁ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻼ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺳﻠﺱ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﻧﻳﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺻﻑ ﻁﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻓﺭﻕ ﺍﻻﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺻﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﻣﻥ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺯﻳﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺩﺧﻭﻝ ﺯﻳﺕ ﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﻘﻠﻝ ﻋﻣﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻘﺑﺿﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺗﻔﻅ ﺑﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺯﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻡ ﻟﻠﻣﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 120‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ )ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻛﺳﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ,70%‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻊ ‪ 70‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ,80%‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺳُﻣﻙ‬
‫‪ 15‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺍﻟﺭﻁﻭﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻭﻗﻌﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ ,80%‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺳُﻣﻙ ‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﻛﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺳُﻣﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﻛﺛﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻁﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ 0.045‬ﻭﺍﺕ‪)/‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﻛﻳﻠﻔﻥ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ )ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 20‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ .3.4‬ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ )ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﻣﺎﻭﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺗﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺳﺭﺏ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻭﺗﻛﻭﻳﻥ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺧﻁﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻬﺏ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺍﻧﺯﻉ ﺍﻷﻏﻁﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ )ﻏﺎﺯ(‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ )ﺳﺎﺋﻝ(‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺳﻳﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺩﺭ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺳﻙ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺃﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﻣﻔﺗﺎﺣﻳﻥ ‪.2‬‬
‫)ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﻠﻳﺞ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ‬
‫]ﻣﻡ )ﺑﻭﺻﺔ([‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫]ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ )ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ·ﺳﻡ([‬
‫‪ (1/4) 6.35‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 160) 18‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(180‬‬
‫‪ (3/8) 9.52‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 32‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 320) 42‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(420‬‬
‫‪ (1/2) 12.70‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 49‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 490) 61‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(610‬‬
‫‪ (5/8) 15.88‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 63‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 630) 75‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(750‬‬
‫‪ (3/4) 19.05‬ﻗﻁﺭ‬
‫‪ 90‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 900) 110‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(1,100‬‬
‫ﺻﺎﻣﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻔﻠﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ(‬
‫‪Ar-4‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:21 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 4‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‬
‫‪ .4.4‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ )ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ(‪ ,‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻳﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ( ﻭﺍﻟﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ(‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﻡ ﺑﺫﻟﻙ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﺣﺹ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻟﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﻭﻝ ‪ 2‬ﺟﺯﺋﻲ ﻗﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺳﺎﺋﻝ(‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﻑ‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﻳﺗﻳﻥ ﺑﺷﺭﻳﻁ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻠﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺟﺩ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺿﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻭﻣﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺛﺑﺕ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺻﻕ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ )ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ‪ PVC‬ﻁﺭﺍﺯ ‪ (VP25‬ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﻗﻊ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺄﺧﺫ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻘﻲ‪) .‬ﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﻭﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﺳﺎﻭﻱ ﺣﺗﻰ ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﻭﻣﺎﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ(‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‪) .‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺭﺳﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺧﻁﻳﻁﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺻﻝ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻭﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﻛﺑﻳﺭ( )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻘﺎﺭﻧﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﺑﺽ‬
‫ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺗﺭﺍﻛﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻓﻳﻧﻳﻝ ﻣﻌﺩﺓ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ‬
‫)ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺯﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﻣﻠﺣﻕ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﺑﺩﻭﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺑﻼﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﻏﺎﺯ ﻛﺑﺭﻳﺗﻳﺗﻲ‪) .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﺂﻛﻝ ﻟﻠﻣﺑﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻘﻁﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺋﻲ ﻣﻥ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﺷﻔﺎﻑ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻧﻬﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (a‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫)‪ (b‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﺟﺎﻧﺑﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫‪VP25‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺿﻊ ﻣﺎﺩﺓ ﻻﺻﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪) .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ(‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ )‪ 1/100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (1/50‬ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﺱ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺍﻛﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻧﺳﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺑﻭﻟﻳﻔﻳﻧﻳﻝ ﻛﻠﻭﺭﻳﺩ ﺻﻠﺑﺔ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ )‪] (VP25‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ[‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻁﻭﻳﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺩﻋﺎﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻧﻔﺫ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﻧﺯﻑ ﻫﻭﺍﺋﻲ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﻧﻔﺟﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻛﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺻﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻁﻘﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻼﺻﻕ‬
‫‪ 35‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺧﻁ ﺍﻟﻌﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ 4‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ 1.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 2‬ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻠﻳﻕ‬
‫)‪ (c‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻋﻠﻭﻱ‬
‫)‪ (d‬ﻣﻧﻅﺭ ﻓﺗﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻓﻕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺧﺭﻁﻭﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ‪ 1/100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1/50‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﺟﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺗﺑﺎﺱ‬
‫ﻧﺯﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﺻﺭﻑ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ 850‬ﻣﻡ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺑُﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ ﻣﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﺭﺃﺳﻳًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﻣﻭﺿﻊ ‪ 300‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ ‪ 1/100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1/50‬‬
‫‪ 300‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪) VP25‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 32‬ﻣﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﺭﺗﻳﺏ ﻣﺣﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ 850‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﻷﺳﻔﻝ‬
‫‪) VP30‬ﻗﻁﺭ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪ 38‬ﻣﻡ( ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺣﺩﺍﺭ ﺳﻔﻠﻲ ‪ 1/100‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1/50‬‬
‫‪ 850‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪Ar-5‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:21 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 5‬‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫‪ .6‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺷﺧﺹ ﻣﻌﺗﻣﺩ ﺑﻣﻭﺟﺏ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻗﻠﻳﻣﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﻔﺫﺓ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺭﺍﺯ‬
‫‪MCA‬‬
‫‪AUXM018GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.24‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪AUXM024GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.29‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪MFA‬‬
‫‪AUXM030GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.50‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪AUXK018GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.41‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﻣﻥ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻ ﻳﺟﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXK024GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.41‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻗﻭﻯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺗﺅﺛﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺣﻛﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AUXK030GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.46‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪AUXK034GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.46‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪AUXK036GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.57‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪AUXK045GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 0.81‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪AUXK054GLAH‬‬
‫‪ 1.04‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺣﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺧﻁﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﻳﻕ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺭﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺑﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺃﻛﻣﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﺭﺍﻥ ﻷﺟﻝ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺿﻣﻧﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﻳﺣﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﺩﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺗﻣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺩﻭﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻣﻁﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻭﺃﻟﻭﺍﻥ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ .(RB‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﻁﺋﺔ ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ ﺍﻟﻣﻛﻭﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﺎﺳﻛﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﺍء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ‬
‫ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺩﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 20‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ .B‬ﻣﺗﻁﻠﺑﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫‪ .1.1.6‬ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺣﺟﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻪ )ﻣﻡ‪(2‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪2.5‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ‪ IEC57 245‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ +‬ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪0.33‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﻓﻕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫®‪LONWORKS‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ 22‬ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻘﻳﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻣﺭﻳﻛﻲ‬
‫)‪ (AWG‬ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻭﻯ ‪ (NEMA) 4‬ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‬
‫ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ ﺑﻘﻁﺭ ‪ 0.65‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻳﺩﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻣﻌﺎﻳﻳﺭ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﺄﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺇﻳﺟﺎﺑﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺟﻳﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﺷﻭﺏ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻠﻑ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺑﺩﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺻ ﱢﻧﻊ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻛﻳﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺻﻳﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺷﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﺅﻫﻠﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﺣﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻣﺎﺛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻔﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﻣﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻟـ ‪ MCA‬ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ RB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻻ‬
‫ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 15‬ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻟﻘﻳﻣﺔ ‪ MCA‬ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪ ،RB‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪.RB‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ RB‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺗﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻳﻙ ﺇﻣﺎ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻭﺍﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺑﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ "ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ" *‪ :1‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﻧﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪.RB‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ‪+‬‬
‫ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ‪ "RB‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ" *‪ :2‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪ 100‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻘﺳﻳﻡ ﻛﻣﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)*‪(1‬‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﺻﻐﻳﺭﺓ ﻣﻥ ‪ 9‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ‬
‫‪ 44‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ 0.1 ,‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ‪ 30‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 100‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‪ 0.1 ,‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 45‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(2*) 148‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺣﺭﺹ ﺩﺍﺋﻣًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪) .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﺩﺵ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺣﺩﺙ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬
‫ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺗﻡ ﻓﺻﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺭﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺎﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪ .‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺣﺩﺙ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ :MCA‬ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫• ‪ :MFA‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻗﺩﺭﺓ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺻﻬﺭ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺳﻠﻙ(‬
‫‪ 0.33‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪1.25‬‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻗﻁﺑﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ‪ PVC‬ﻣﻐﻠﻑ *‪1‬‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻐﻠﻑ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.6‬ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪1* RB‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﺑﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻏﺎﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎﺳﻭﺭﺓ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺿﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺃﺭﺿﻲ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻟﻠﻬﺎﺗﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺄﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﻅﺭً ﺍ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻙ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺗﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺟﻧﺏ ﻣﻁﻠ ًﻘﺎ ﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻌًﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺳﺎﻓﺔ ‪ 50‬ﻣﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺛﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺭﺑﻁ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻌًﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻭء ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﺎﻣﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ ,‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﻛﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ ﻗﺩ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻻﺣﺗﻳﺎﻁﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻧﺷﺎء ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺃﺭﺿﻳﺔ )ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ( ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺻﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ )ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺯء ﺍﻟﻣﻌﺩﻧﻲ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻣﺩﺓ ﺗﺯﻳﺩ ﻋﻥ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻭﺍﻧﻲ ﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺗﺎﺗﻳﻛﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺷﺣﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺳﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻ ﺗﻠﻣﺱ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻭﺍﻟﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .1.6‬ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻁﻠﺏ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﺣﺩﺩ ﻧﻭﻉ ﻭﺣﺟﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻓ ًﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻘﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻭﻁﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺗﻔﻕ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‬
‫‪ 230‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 198‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 264‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ 50‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫‪ 198‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 253‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ )‪ 60‬ﻫﺭﺗﺯ(‬
‫• ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺳﻠﻙ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻧﺧﻔﺎﺽ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﺃﻗﻝ ﻣﻥ ‪ .2%‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﻝ ﺃﻛﺑﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻭﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻟﻛﻝ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺋﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﻣﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﺗﺣﻘﻕ ﺍﻟﺷﺭﻭﻁ ‪ A‬ﻭ‪ B‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪*2‬‬
‫‪*2‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻔﺭﻋﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪ *2‬ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫‪*3‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪.RB‬‬
‫*‪ :2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ( ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺕ ﺗﺗﺿﻣﻥ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ )ﺃﺭﺿﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :3‬ﻻ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻋﺎﺑﺭﺓ ﻹﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ‬
‫ﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ‬
‫ﻗﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Ar-6‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:21 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 6‬‬
‫‪ .2.3.6‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ .3.6‬ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫• ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫‪ .1.3.6‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻐﻠﻑ‬
‫)ﺑﺩﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺭﻗﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫‪ 20‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫‪ 30‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫‪ .A‬ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫‪ 45‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻭﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪.C .Fig‬‬
‫‪C .Fig‬‬
‫ﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﻁﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻋﻣﻝ ﻁﻳﺔ ﺣﻭﻝ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻭﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻛﺑﻠﻲ )‪ (2‬ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ‬
‫ﺟﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻧﺯﻉ ‪ 25‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ﻗﻁﺭ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻑ‬
‫ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺎﻧﺏ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‬
‫ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫)ﺣﻠﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪) M3‬ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ ‪(X2, X1 /‬‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ‪(Y3, Y2, Y1 /‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ )ﺣﻠﻘﺔ(‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0.6‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ‬
‫)‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 6‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻟﺗﻘﺷﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﺧﺻﺻﺔ ﻻ ﺗﺗﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﻓﺭﻋﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﺗﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺻﺩﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺭﺑﺎﺋﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺭﻳﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﻻ ﺗﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺭﻁ ﻟﻠﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻳﺔ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪ ،‬ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺑﻭﻁ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻁﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﻣﺭﻛﺯ ﻣﺻﻣﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺑﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺿﻐﻁ ﻟﻠﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﻲ ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﻭﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .4.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .B‬ﻟﻸﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺩﻭﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺄﻛﻣﺎﻡ ﻋﺎﺯﻟﺔ ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻌﺷﻳﻕ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺃﺩﺍﺓ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﻣﻔﻛﻭﻛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺛﻡ ﺛﺑﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﺃﻱ ﺷﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻧﺎﺳﺏ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﺻﻐﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﺗﻠﻑ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ ﻭﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﻔﺭﻁ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﻳﻧﻛﺳﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺯﻡ ﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺭﺟﻰ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﻛﺑﻠﻲ )‪ (2‬ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺣﺩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫)‪(7‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ )ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ(‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻧﺯﻉ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻡ‬
‫ُﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ )ﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ(‬
‫ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻣﺭﺭ ﻛﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻋﺑﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺛﻠﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺑﻳﻧﺔ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻛﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺄﻣﻳﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺷﺎﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫‪N‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﺫﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﻠﻘﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻑ ﺫﻟﻙ‪ ،‬ﻗﺩ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺳﺧﻭﻧﺔ ﺯﺍﺋﺩﺓ ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻳﺔ ﻭﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺗﻣﻝ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺳﺑﺏ ﺗﻠﻑ ﺷﺩﻳﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺯﻡ ﺍﻟﺭﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺑﺭﻏﻲ ‪) M3.5‬ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪/‬ﻣﻛﻬﺭﺏ‪ ،‬ﻣﺣﺎﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺿﻲ(‬
‫‪ 1.2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1.8‬ﻧﻳﻭﺗﻥ ﻣﺗﺭ )‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 18‬ﻛﺟﻡ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺳﻡ(‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺭﻳﺽ(‬
‫‪L‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫‪Ar-7‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:21 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 7‬‬
‫‪ .2.5.6‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ :X2 ،X1‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻧﻘﻝ‬
‫ﺷﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪/‬ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻣﻠﺣﻕ ﺑﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺯﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻳﺩﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻏﻠﻳﻅ ﻣﻌﺯﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻌﺩ ﻟﺭﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﻁﻘﻡ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﺣﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻁﻘﻡ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﻠﺣﺎﻡ ﻭﻋﺯﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺑﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻳُﺭﻛﺏ ﺑﺎﻟﺩﻓﻊ )ﻣﻠﺣﻘﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺗﺭﺗﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﻣﻛﻧﺔ ﻷﺟﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ‪ ,‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻼﺕ ﻣﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ Y1‬ﻭ‪ :Y2‬ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ‪(.Y3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫‪CN65‬‬
‫‪CNA01 CNA03‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫ﻣﺷﺑﻙ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻝ‬
‫‪ .6.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﺃﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫)‪ (4‬ﺃﻋﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻏﻁﺎء ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻭﻏﻁﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺑﻁ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺍﻏﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺣﻛﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .1.6.6‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﻣﻧﻔﺫ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﻣﻌﺟﻭﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺯﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻻ ﺗﺩﺧﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺑﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CNA02‬ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﺃﻭ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ" ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺇﺟﺑﺎﺭﻳًﺎ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪ CNA03‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫‪ CNA04‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .(AWG22‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ‪ 150‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ﻣﻧﻔﺻﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺧﻁ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺃﺣﺩ ﺃﻧﻭﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻼﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‪) .‬ﻻ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻋﻳﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪(.‬‬
‫● ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ )]‪([CNA03] ،[CNA01‬‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺣﺯﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻣﺩﺩ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﻣﺗﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻙ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ( ﻭﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﻋﻁﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .5.6‬ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺳﻼﻙ ﺍﻷﺟﺯﺍء ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ )]‪،[CNA01‬‬
‫]‪.([CNA03‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪CN65‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫‪*a‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪ .1.5.6‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ ﻭﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪*1‬‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫‪*b‬‬
‫‪SET 2‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫)‪(SET 2‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪*a‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪SW1 SW3‬‬
‫‪SW2 SW4‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻡ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺗﻌﻣﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪3‬‬
‫‪CNA03‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫‪*a‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻼﻣﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﺍﺟﻌﻝ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪ .‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﺎﺋﺽ ﻏﺯﻳﺭ ﻟﻠﺣﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺗﺻﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺟﻬﺩًﺍ ﻳﺗﺟﺎﻭﺯ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪ 2-1‬ﻭ‪.3-1‬‬
‫*‪ :a‬ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻭ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪ 12 :‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ(‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﻓﻳﺭ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺣﻣﻝ ﺑﺣﻳﺙ ﻳﺻﺑﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ‪ 10‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :b‬ﺍﻟﻘﻁﺑﻳﺔ ﺗﻛﻭﻥ ]‪ [+‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﺎﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ]‪ [-‬ﻟﻠﻣﺳﻣﺎﺭ ‪ 2‬ﻭ‪ .3‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪SET 2‬‬
‫)‪(SW2‬‬
‫ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫‪CN65‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺍﺣﺩ ﻣﻣﺎ ﻳﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻭﺻﻝ )*‪MODBUS® (1‬‬
‫• ﻣﺣﻭﻝ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )*‪(1‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫*‪ :1‬ﻟﻣﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ar-8‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:20 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 8‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﻣﻝ ﺗﻔﺭﻳﻌﺔ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺻﻧﺩﻭﻕ ﺳﺣﺏ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺣﻣﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫* ﺍﻷﻣﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻳﺭ ﻟﻪ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺗﻌﻣﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺿﻣﻥ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪CNA01‬‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫* ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻟﻧﻔﺱ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ )]‪([CNA04] ،[CNA02‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﻣﻥ ﻏﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﺯﻭﻳﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺫﻱ ﺗﺭﻳﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ‬
‫)]‪.([CNA04] ،[CNA02‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ"‪.‬‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪*c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺿﻲ‬
‫‪*c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﻧﺑﺽ"[‬
‫‪*d‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪*c‬‬
‫ﻗﻧﺎﺓ ‪3‬‬
‫‪CNA04‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻧﺷﻳﻁ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ" ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫* ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺷﻛﻳﻝ ﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺟﻣﻭﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :c‬ﺣﺩﺩ ﻣﻼﻣﺳﺎﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺗﻳﺎﺭً ﺍ ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺧﺩﻣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ‪ 1‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :d‬ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻣﺧﺗﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺗﻁﺑﻳﻕ ﺍﻟﺟﻬﺩ‪ .‬ﻛﻥ ﺣﺫﺭً ﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺄﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺟﺎﻑ ﻟﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻌﺯﻝ ﻛﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻣﺭﺣﻝ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺣﺩﻳﺩ ﺃﺳﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﺎﺋﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ" ﺃﻭ "ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ" ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ" ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫]ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ" ﻓﻘﻁ[‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪K1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫‪K4‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA03‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA04‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ .2.6.6‬ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻣﺭﺣﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫‪K2‬‬
‫‪K5‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺟﺏ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻠﻔﻭﻑ )ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ‪ .(22AWG‬ﺃﻗﺻﻰ ﻁﻭﻝ ﻟﻠﻛﺑﻝ ‪ 25‬ﻣﺗﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﻧﺎﺳﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻛﺑﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺍﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‪ :‬ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ ‪ 2±12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﻣﻭﺡ ﺑﻪ‪ 50 :‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺃﻣﺑﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻳﺭﻩ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪K3‬‬
‫‪K6‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪CNB‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ :K6 - K1‬ﻣﺭﺣﻝ‬
‫)ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻟﻠﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻅﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻌﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺑﺎﺷﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺳﺑﺏ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺟﻬﺯﺓ ﺑﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫● ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺯ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺑﺩﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ]ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪[SW2 2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫ﺣﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻧﺑﺽ‬
‫● ﻋﻧﺩﻣﺎ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ "ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ"‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﺑﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻧﺎﺓ‪ 1‬ﻟـ ‪ CNA01‬ﺃﻭ ‪CNA02‬‬
‫‪CNB‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﺍﻟﻧﺑﺽ ﻳﺟﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺃﻁﻭﻝ ﻣﻥ‬
‫‪ 200‬ﻣﻳﻠﻲ ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪3‬‬
‫ﻣﺭﺣﻝ )ﻳﺗﻡ ﺷﺭﺍﺅﻩ ﻣﺣﻠﻳًﺎ(‬
‫]ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ "ﺣﺯ"[‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺗﺻﻝ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ← ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ← ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪Ar-9‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:20 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 9‬‬
‫‪Table A‬‬
‫ﺳﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺩ ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺻﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪2-1‬‬
‫‪CNB01‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪3-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺭﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺎﻣﻳﺭ ‪4-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 12‬ﻓﻭﻟﺕ ﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﻣﺳﺗﻣﺭ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺛﻣﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻁﺭﻕ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺟﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺟﺎء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﻛﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ )‪ (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ (3‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ IU AD‬ﻭ‪:REF AD SW‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻛﺑﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪:‬‬
‫)‪ (3‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺳﻡ )‪ 1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ REF AD SW ،IU AD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(0‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ REF AD SW ،IU AD‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪(0‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪IU AD SW‬‬
‫×‪1‬‬
‫× ‪10‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫⁞‬
‫⁞‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫‪REF AD SW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫×‪1‬‬
‫× ‪10‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫⁞‬
‫⁞‬
‫⁞‬
‫⁞‬
‫‪63‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪99‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )‪ (IU AD SW‬ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ 64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.99‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﺩ ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺗﻌﻁﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫• ﻳﺅﺩﻱ ﺍﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﺧﻠﻁ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ(‬
‫)ﻳﻣﻛﻧﻙ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺣﺗﻰ ‪ 4‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ‪(.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻛﻝ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺎﺱ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ‬
‫‪ .1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻧﺑﻳﻪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻣﻔﻙ ﻣﻌﺯﻭﻝ ﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺗﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻏﻠﻕ ﻭﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺛﺑﻳﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﺑﻌﺩ ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫‪RC AD‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪REF AD‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪IU AD‬‬
‫)‪ (1‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﻔﻙ ﺍﻟﺑﺭﻏﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪×1‬‬
‫‪×10‬‬
‫‪SET4‬‬
‫‪×1‬‬
‫‪×10‬‬
‫‪SET3‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺭﻣﺯ ﻣﺧﺻﺹ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪RC AD‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪ SET3 SW1‬ﻭ ‪ ،2‬ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺭﺟﻭﻉ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺷﻛﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪REF AD‬‬
‫‪×1‬‬
‫‪IU AD‬‬
‫‪×1‬‬
‫‪×10‬‬
‫‪SET4‬‬
‫‪×10‬‬
‫‪SET3‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ "‪"SET3‬‬
‫)‪ (2‬ﺣﺭﻙ ﺍﻟﻐﻁﺎء ﻭﺍﻓﺗﺣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ "‪"SET3‬‬
‫‪ .1.1.7‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(IU AD × 1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(IU AD × 10‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ‪ IU AD SW‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪.Table A‬‬
‫‪ .2.1.7‬ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺩﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ ‪SET3‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﻣﺧﺻﺹ‬
‫‪) A‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ(‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪SW1‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪SW2‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫‪SW SW SW SW‬‬
‫‪1 2 3 4‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(IU AD × 1‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺩﻭﺍﺭ )‪...(IU AD × 10‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﻧﻊ "‪"0‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ REF AD SW‬ﻛﻣﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻣﻭﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ‪ Table A‬ﻟﻛﻝ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻔﺱ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻣﺛﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻣﻔﺗﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪63‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪2‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99‬‬
‫ﻣﺛﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪63‬‬
‫‪IU AD × 10‬‬
‫‪REF AD × 10‬‬
‫‪IU AD × 1‬‬
‫‪REF AD × 1‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻣﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻳﺋﺔ ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﻓﻳﻬﺎ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﻭﻳﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫"‪."00‬‬
‫)ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪(.‬‬
‫‪Ar-10‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:20 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 10‬‬
‫‪ .8‬ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‬
‫‪ .3.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪) .‬ﺗﻌﺗﺑﺭ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺯﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺻﻳﻠﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "‪ 1.7‬ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﻭﺍﻥ" ﻟﻠﺗﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻭﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻭﻡ ﺑﺗﻬﻳﺋﺔ ‪ ،EEV‬ﻟﺫﺍ ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺗﻔﺭﻳﻎ‬
‫ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺃﻳﺿًﺎ ﺃﻓﺣﺹ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ ﻟﻠﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺭﺗﻛﺎﺏ ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻗﺑﻝ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻁﻭﻳﻝ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻗﺻﻳﺭ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﻫﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﻘﻑ‬
‫‪20‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‬
‫‪23‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪30‬‬
‫ﺍﻁﻼﻕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ‬
‫‪31‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪40‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﻊ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‬
‫‪43‬‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪46‬‬
‫ﻫﺩﻑ ﺗﻘﺭﻳﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫‪47‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪49‬‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪60‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪61‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫)ﻣﺣﻅﻭﺭ(‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻧﻭﻉ ﺍﻟﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪68‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ 00‬ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ ﺿﺑﻁ ﻭﺍﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫)ﺗﻘﻠﻳﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻗﻳﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺩ‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺳﻘﻑ ﻣﺭﺗﻔﻊ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻗﻳﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(1‬‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(2‬‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ )‪(3‬‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺽ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺑﺩء‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻛﻝ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‬
‫‪00‬‬
‫ﺍﺗﺑﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﻔﺎﺻﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻓﺗﺭﺍﺿﻲ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺇﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﻓﺎﺻﻝ ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺑﻛﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ‬
‫‪ .01‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺧﻁﺎﺭ ﻣﺗﺄﺧﺭً ﺍ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﻣﺅﺷﺭ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ 02‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﺑﻌًﺎ ﻟﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﻓﺟﻭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺷﺑﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻳﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .9‬ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫‪ .1.9‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ )ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ(‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﻟﻠﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .2.9‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫• ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺃﺟﻝ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻻﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﺳﺗﺧﺩﺍﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻧﺩ ﺇﺟﺭﺍء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﺧﺗﺑﺎﺭ ﻟﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‪ ،‬ﺗﻭﻣﺽ ﻣﺻﺎﺑﻳﺢ ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ‪) OPERATION‬ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( ﻭ‪) TIMER‬ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ( ﺑﺑﻁء‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺱ ﺍﻟﻭﻗﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .10‬ﻗﺎﺋﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻧﺗﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﺧﺻﻭﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ )ﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ( ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺩ ﻣﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺣﺹ ﺍﻟﻌﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺎﺻﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺣﺹ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻡ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﺍﻻﻫﺗﺯﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺿﺎء‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺗﻣﺎﻝ ﺳﻘﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻧﺎﻙ ﻓﺣﺹ ﻟﺗﺳﺭﻳﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯ )ﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺳﺎﺋﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ(؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺃﻋﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﺯﻝ ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ؟‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺑﺳﻬﻭﻟﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﺗﺳﺭﻳﺏ ﺍﻟﻣﻳﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺭﺃﺳﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﺗﻡ ﺿﺑﻁ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﻓﺗﺣﺎﺕ ﺍﺗﺟﺎﻩ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻣﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺟﻬﺩ ﻣﺻﺩﺭ ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻧﻔﺳﻪ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﻳﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﺻﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﻟﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻭﺍﺳﻳﺭ ﺟﻣﻳﻌًﺎ ﺑﺷﻛﻝ ﺻﺣﻳﺢ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﻣﺗﺻﻠﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﺽ )ﻣﺅﺭﺿﺔ(؟‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﻗﺻﺭ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻛﺑﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﺳﻣﺎﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻣﺣﺩﺩﺓ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻑ ﺑﺳﺑﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺣﺗﺭﺍﻕ‬
‫ﺗﻧﻅﻳﻡ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺳﺏ ﺍﺣﺗﻳﺎﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ .‬ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ,01‬ﻳﻛﻭﻥ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﻗﻭﻳًﺎ‪) .‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﻛﻝ ﻋﻠﻳﺑﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ(‬
‫ﺿﺑﻁ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺇﻁﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺧﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 6‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪ .01‬ﻟﺗﻘﻠﻳﻝ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‬
‫ﺑﻣﻘﺩﺍﺭ ‪ 4‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.02‬‬
‫ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﻁﻼﻕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ‪.03‬‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﺍﻟﻣﺩﺍﺧﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﻣﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺧﺎﻟﻳﺔ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻭﺍﺋﻕ؟‬
‫ﻋﺩﻡ ﻭﺟﻭﺩ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻝ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺑﺩء ﻭﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺗﻛﻳﻳﻑ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ؟‬
‫ﻻ ﻳﻭﺟﺩ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻣﻛﻳﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻧﻅﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻧﻘﻁﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻁﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﺳﺗﻛﻣﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ‪ ،‬ﻫﻝ ﺗﻡ ﺗﻭﺿﻳﺢ ﺍﻟﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺻﺣﻳﺢ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻣﻌﺎﻟﺟﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻣﻳﻝ؟‬
‫ﺧﺎﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺧﺗﻳﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻣﻧﻊ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء ﺍﻟﺑﺎﺭﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺟﻌﻝ ﺗﺩﻓﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﻭﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻧﺧﻔﺿًﺎ ﻋﻧﺩ ﺑﺩء ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻼﺳﺗﺟﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺗﻬﻭﻳﺔ‪ ,‬ﻗﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.01‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻣﺎﺡ ﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ ﺑﺑﺩء ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻧﻅﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻧﻔﻳﺫ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻁﻭﺍﺭﺉ ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻌﻁﻳﻝ‬
‫ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺃﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺟﺑﺎﺭﻱ‪ ،‬ﺳﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺗﻡ ﺗﻘﻳﻳﺩ ﻭﻅﻳﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺑﺩء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻳﻳﺭ ﺍﻟﻬﺩﻑ ﻟﺭﻓﻊ ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﻁﺎء‪ .‬ﻳﻣﻛﻥ ﺭﻓﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺎﺭﻳﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﺧﻁﺎء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻣﻳﻊ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻛﺯﻳﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻧﺩ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ,01‬ﺗﺗﻭﻗﻑ ﺍﻟﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﻋﻧﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻣﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ ﺗﻭﺻﻳﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ ﻭﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﻼﻙ( ﻭﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻡ ﺑﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﻁﺭﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻟﻠﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺯﺩﻭﺝ )ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‪/‬ﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻧﺳﺑﺔ ﻷﻧﻅﻣﺔ ﻣﺿﺧﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﺿﺭﻭﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ )ﺑﻭﺍﺳﻁﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0 00‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 0.5 01‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.0 02‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 1.5 03‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 2.0 04‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 2.5 05‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺗﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻳﻥ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺗﺩﻓﺋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻧﻁﺎﻕ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺩ( ﻟﻠﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﻧﻘﻁﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﻡ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻡ ‪.(68‬‬
‫‪ 3.0 06‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 3.5 07‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 4.0 08‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ 4.5 09‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺋﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪Ar-11‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:20 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 11‬‬
‫ﻋﺭﺽ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ .11‬ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻣﻥ ﻧﻭﻉ ﺳﻠﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻧﺕ ﺗﺳﺗﺧﺩﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ ﻻﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻛﺎﺷﻑ ﺍﻟﺿﻭﺋﻲ ﺳﻭﻑ ﺗﺻﺩﺭ ﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻳﻕ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺃﻧﻣﺎﻁ ﻭﻣﻳﺽ ﺍﻟﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ﻭﺭﻣﻭﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺅﺷﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪TIMER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺅﻗﺕ(‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺑﺭﺗﻘﺎﻟﻲ(‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ‬
‫‪OPERATION‬‬
‫)ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ( )ﺃﺧﺿﺭ(‬
‫ﻣﺻﺑﺎﺡ ‪FILTER‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻣﺭﺷﺢ(‬
‫)ﺍﻷﺣﻣﺭ(‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﺑﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫*‪) UTY-RNR*Z‬ﺍﻟﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﻼﻙ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Next Page‬ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺗﺎﻟﻳﺔ( )ﺃﻭ ]‪[previous page‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺻﻔﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ( ﻟﻠﺗﺑﺩﻳﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺭﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻣﺣﺗﻭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ‬
‫ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺷﺑﻛﺔ‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻁﺭﻓﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(6‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺇﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﻧﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺗﺻﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻅﺎﻡ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺩﺍﺩ ﻁﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻟﻭﺣﺔ ﻛﻣﺑﻳﻭﺗﺭ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺭﺋﻳﺳﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫)‪(10‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﺭﺓ ﺍﺗﺻﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ )ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻛﻳﺔ(‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺭﻓﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺗﺭﻣﻭﺳﺗﺎﺕ ﺣﺭﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻣﺑﺎﺩﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺣﺭﺍﺭﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫)‪(4‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﺍﻟﻣﺳﺗﺷﻌﺭ ﺍﻟﺑﺷﺭﻱ‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻭﺗﻭﺭ ﻣﺭﻭﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(2‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﻠﻑ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻣﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺗﻭﺳﻌﺔ(‬
‫)‪(5‬‬
‫)‪(3‬‬
‫ﺗﺻﺭﻳﻑ ﻣﻳﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺩﺍﺧﻠﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻏﻳﺭ ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫)‪(9‬‬
‫)‪(15‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻣﺗﻧﻭﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺧﺎﺭﺟﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪(10‬‬
‫)‪(8‬‬
‫ﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺳﺎﺋﻠﺔ ﺗﺑﺭﻳﺩ ﺿﻌﻳﻔﺔ‬
‫)‪(13‬‬
‫)‪(1‬‬
‫ﺧﻁﺄ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ‪RB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Error Information‬ﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻣﺱ ]‪) [Status‬ﺍﻟﺣﺎﻟﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺗﻭﺍﻓﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺭﻗﻣﻳﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺟﺩﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺳﺎﺑﻕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪) *UTY-RLR‬ﻧﻭﻉ ﺛﻧﺎﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺳﻠﻙ ‪(2‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﻭﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﺭﻣﺯ ﺍﻟﺧﻁﺄ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺭﺽ‬
‫)(‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻣﺯﻳﺩ ﻣﻥ ﺍﻟﻣﻌﻠﻭﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺩﻟﻳﻝ ﺗﺭﻛﻳﺏ ﻭﺣﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺗﺣﻛﻡ ﻋﻥ ﺑﻌﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ 0.5‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ 0.5 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻔﺎء‬
‫‪ 0.1‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺗﺷﻐﻳﻝ ‪ 0.1 /‬ﺛﺎﻧﻳﺔ ﺍﻧﻁﻔﺎء‬
‫ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻭﻣﻳﺽ‬
‫‪Ar-12‬‬
‫‪9/10/2019 11:21:20 AM‬‬
‫‪9371022475-04_IM_Ar.indd 12‬‬
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement